2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Horizontal Control: This control adjusts the seat
cushion.
Front Seats
• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the control. Raise
or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control.
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole control toward the front or toward the rear
of the vehicle.
• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by moving
the whole control up or down.
Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by
moving the control toward the rear or toward the front
of the vehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.
For more information on the reclining seatbacks,
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
edge of the front seats.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with power
lumbar.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has the
heated seat feature, the
buttons are located on the
front doors.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats, see
The engine must be running for the heated seats to work.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the
button to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium and low and to turn the heated seat off.
Indicator lights will be lit to designate the level of heat
selected: three for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
Heated and Cooled Seats
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
seatback button will be lit to designate that only the
seatback is being heated. Additional presses of
the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again
to heat the whole seat.
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. The
buttons used to control this feature are located on
the instrument panel, under the radio.
The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition
is turned off. If you still want to use the heated front
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the heated seat button again.
With the heated and cooled seats you can choose high,
medium or low heat or cool settings. The seats will
only operate either in the heat or cool mode; for
example, you cannot cool the seat cushion while heating
the seatback. An amber light will flash when a setting
cannot be selected.
Your vehicle also has heated rear seats. See Heated
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To operate the heated and cooled seats, do the
following:
Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have a recline feature which is described
1. Press the red heat button (A) or the blue cool
button (B).
2. Choose one of the following:
I (Seatback Only): This can only be used for the
heat feature. Press this button to heat the seatback and
cycle through the heat settings of high, medium, low
and off. Red indicator lights will glow for each heat
setting chosen: three lights for high, two for medium and
one for low. A light in the button will also glow to
indicate the seatback heat is on.
J (Entire Seat): Press this button to heat or cool the
entire seat and cycle through the settings of high,
medium, low and off. Red (for heat) or blue (for cool)
indicator lights will glow for each setting chosen:
three lights for high, two for medium and one for low.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Push the head
restraint down to lower it.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each front head restraint can also be tilted forward to
four positions by pulling on it.
1. Reach over the second
row seat and pull up on
the strap loop located
in the center of the
A click will sound after each tilt position is reached.
Pull the head restraint forward, past the last position, to
release it to the upright position.
seat where the
seatback and the seat
cushion meet. Then
pull the seat cushion up
and push it forward.
The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable up and
down, but they do not tilt.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
2. Next, push the seatback forward until it is flat with
the floor.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row
Seats
Regular Models
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the 60/40 Split Bench seat in the
second row, you must flip and fold the second row seat
following the instructions later in this section. See
exit the third row seat with no assistance, do the
following:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Return the seat to the normal seating position when
finished. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Extended Models
The passenger’s side of both the second row 60/40 split
bench seat and the second row bucket seat has an
easy entry/exit feature. This makes it easy to get in and
out of the third row seat.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To operate the easy entry seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the release lever on the outboard side of the
back of the seat.
Return the seat to the normal seating position when
finished. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
2. Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle and
the seat will release.
3. Pull (push if you are exiting the third row with no
assistance) the seat forward until it stops.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Heated and Cooled Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the buttons used
to control this feature
are located on the back of
the center console. The
engine must be running for
the heated seat feature
to work.
Your vehicle may be
equipped with this feature.
The buttons used to
control this feature are
located on the back of the
center console.
To heat the seat cushion, press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high and low. Press
the button a third time to turn the feature off. An
indicator light will glow for each heat setting when the
feature is operating.
With the heated and cooled seats you can choose high,
medium or low heat or cool settings. The seats will
only operate either in the heat or cool mode; for
example, you cannot cool the seat cushion while heating
the seatback. An amber light will flash when a setting
cannot be selected.
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To operate the heated and cooled seats, do the
following:
Flip and Fold Feature
To flip and fold the seat, do the following:
1. Press the red heat button (A) or the blue cool
button (B).
1. Make sure that there is nothing under or in front of
the seat.
2. Choose one of the following:
2. Make sure that the headrests are completely
lowered or removed.
I (Seatback Only): This can only be used for the
heat feature. Press this button to heat the seatback and
cycle through the heat settings of high, medium, low
and off. Red indicator lights will glow for each heat
setting chosen: three lights for high, two for medium and
one for low. A light in the button will also glow to
indicate the seatback heat is on.
On regular models, the rear seatbacks may be
equipped with rearward folding headrests. When the
seatback is being folded forward, the head rest
will automatically fold rearward.
On extended models, the headrests need to be
removed and stored. To do this, push the button at
the base of the head rest, and pull the head rest
out from the seatback. Slide the head rest pins into
the holes on the top of the seat cushion.
J (Entire Seat): Press this button to heat or cool the
entire seat and cycle through the settings of high,
medium, low and off. Red (for heat) or blue (for cool)
indicator lights will glow for each setting chosen:
three lights for high, two for medium and one for low.
3. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and flip the seat
cushion forward.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seats can be
flipped and folded for additional cargo space.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Regular models: Push the seatback forward until it
Once the seatbacks are folded forward, on extended
models only, the rear seat footwell area will be exposed
and will have to be covered by the load floor panels.
To create a load floor, do the following:
is flat.
Extended models: On the passenger side, lift the
lever at the base of the seat to release the
seatback. Push the seatback forward until it is flat.
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bring the front seatback more upright.
2. Fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
Pull up on the seat cushion to make sure it is
locked.
Returning the Seats to the Normal
Seating Position
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
1. On extended models, lift the load floor panels and
latch them into the seatback.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
5. Make sure that the safety belt buckles on the
driver’s side seat are accessible to the outboard and
center occupants and are not under the seat
cushions.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the
way. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked in place.
3. On regular models, return the headrests to the
upright position.
On extended models, return the headrests from the
stored position to the seatback.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unfolding the Seatback(s)
50/50 Split Bench Seat (Third Row)
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench seat, the
seatback(s) can be folded and the entire seat(s) can be
tilted, or removed from the vehicle.
1. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1, located
on the rear of the
Folding the Seatback(s)
seatback. Then pull up
on either the seatback
or the assist strap,
located on the outboard
side of the seat, until
the seatback locks into
the upright position.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback,
and push the seatback
forward.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling up
on the lever labeled 2,
located next to the
carrying handle at the
rear of the seat.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
The seat(s) can be tilted forward for additional cargo
space.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward and lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat.
To tilt the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat(s).
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
2. Make sure the head restraints are completely
lowered.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down.
Returning the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
from a Tilted Position
5. Push down on the seat firmly. Try pulling it up to
make sure it is locked in place.
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
6. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on either the
seatback or the assist strap, located on the
outboard side of the seat, until the seatback locks
into the upright position.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat(s).
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you.
7. Push and pull the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
3. While still holding the lever 3 toward you, grasp the
top of the seat and pull it toward you slightly.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench
Seat(s)
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat(s) and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback
is folded.
3. Unlatch the rear of the
seat from the floor by
pulling up on the
5. Squeeze the release lever to release the seat from
the floor, while pulling the seat out.
6. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
release lever labeled 2,
located next to the
carrying handle at the
rear of the seat.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
To install the seat, do the following:
5. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on either the
seatback or the assist strap, located on the
outboard side of the seat, until the seatback locks
into the upright position.
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the
front wheels into the slots on the floor. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do not
lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward.
3. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bench Seat (Third Row)
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a full bench seat, the seatback can
be folded, and the entire seat can be tilted, or removed
from the vehicle.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback, do the following:
Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback,
and push the seatback
forward.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unfolding the Seatback
Tilting the Bench Seat
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
The seat can be tilted forward to provide additional
cargo space.
1. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
To tilt the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat
and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints are completely
lowered.
{CAUTION:
3. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatback” previously.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the
floor unless the seatback is folded down.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling up
on the lever labeled 2,
located on the rear
of the seat.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push it
forward.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Bench Seat from a Tilted
Position
{CAUTION:
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
If the support rod is not properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
bench seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Pull the lever on the
support rod bracket
until it unlatches from
the seat bracket.
6. While holding the seat
forward, pull the
support rod out from
the retainer clips
and flip it down until it
latches into place.
3. Place the support rod back into the storage position.
4. Pull the seat toward you and push firmly down
until the seat latches in the floor.
5. Lift up on the seat to make sure it is locked into
place.
The seat will now remain in the upright position. Place
the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback, and then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
3. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 2, located
at the rear of the
seat, to unlatch the
rear of the seat
from the floor.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
5. Pull on the release
strap, located in the
lower center of
7. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
the seat, to release the
seat from the floor
and pull the seat out.
Use one hand to
pull the release strap
and the other on
Removing the Bench Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
bench seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
the handle to pull the
seat out.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatback” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback
is folded.
6. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install the seat, do the following:
Installing the Bench Seat
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the
front wheels into the slots on the floor. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do not
lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Release the lever labeled 1, located on the rear of
the seat, and pull the seatback up to return it to the
upright position.
Bucket Seats (Second Row)
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined, and the seats can be flipped and folded for
additional cargo space.
{CAUTION:
Reclining the Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Pull up on the lever
located under the
outboard side of the
seat cushion.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Regular Model Lever
shown, Extended Model
Lever similar
2. Move the seatback to the desired position and
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flip and Fold Feature
{CAUTION:
The seat cushions on the bucket seats can be flipped
forward and the seatbacks can be folded forward to give
you more cargo space.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To flip and fold the bucket seats, do the following:
1. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up and fold it
forward.
Pull up on the lever without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
2. On the extended models, remove the headrest and
store it on the top of the seat cushion.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull up on the seatback
release lever, located
on the outboard
side of the seat
cushion, and push the
seatback forward
until it is flat.
Regular Model Lever
shown, Extended Model
Lever similar
Extended Model Only
Push the button at the base of the headrest and
pull the headrest out from the seatback. Slide
the headrest pins into the holes on the top of the
seat cushion to store the headrest.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the seatbacks are folded down, on extended
models only, the rear seat footwell area will be exposed
and will have to be covered by the load floor panel.
To create a load floor, do the following:
Returning the Seats to the Normal
Seating Position
To return the seats to the normal seating position, do
the following:
1. On extended models, lift the load floor panels and
latch them into the seatback.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the
way. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked in place.
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
3. On extended models, return the headrest from the
stored position to the seatback.
4. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
Pull up on the cushion to make sure it is locked.
5. On regular models, return the headrests to the
upright position.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Driver Position
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for
one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature which may turn off the passenger’s
frontal airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
Rear Outside Passenger Positions
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than
those who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
Center Rear Passenger Position
Second Row — Lap-Shoulder Belt
When you sit in the center position of a second row
bench seat, you have a lap-shoulder belt which works
the same way as the rear outside seat positions.
To learn how to wear this belt, see “Lap-Shoulder Belt”
Third Row — Lap Belt
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the
same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If
page 1-47.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
When you sit in the center position of a third row bench
seat, you have a lap safety belt, which has no
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each passenger position with a
lap-shoulder belt in the rear seats. Here is how to install
a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
Second Row Seat
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback or from the side of the center seat.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Row Seat
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Outside Passenger Positions
on page 1-41. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the second row center position,
move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In
either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint that belts
page 1-45. If the child is so small that the shoulder
belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck,
you might want to place the child in a rear seat that
has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Third Row — Regular
Model
Second Row — Bench
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Third Row — Extended
Model
Second Row — Bucket
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Regular models, see the information following for
installing a child restraint with a top tether in the
third row, if you vehicle has one. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether anchor.
For models with a second row bench seat, the rear right
side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
For Regular models, the top tether anchors are located
at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each
seating position in the second row. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Second Row Seat — Regular Models
For Extended models with a bench or bucket second
row seating, the top tether anchors are located at
the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Row Seat — Regular Models
For Extended models with third row seating, the top
tether anchor is located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for the center seating position in the third row.
Second Row Seat (Bucket Similar) — Extended
Models
For Regular models with third row seating, there is
one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion that can be used for either the center
or passenger side seating position in the third row, but
not for both. Never install two top tethers using the
same top tether anchor.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that the
top tether must be attached. There is no place to
attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
Third Row Bench — Extended Models
For Regular models, do not secure a child restraint in
the right front passenger’s position or the third row
driver’s side seating position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top tether must be attached. There is no place
to attach the top tether in this position.
For Extended models, do not secure a child restraint in
the right front passenger’s position or the third row
outboard seating positions if a national or local
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
head restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
For the third row, if your vehicle has a bench seat, there
are no top tether anchors in the outboard seating
positions. If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench seat in
the third row, there is no top tether anchor in the
driver-side seating position. Do not secure a child
restraint in these positions if a national or local
law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that the
top tether must be anchored.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
raise the head restraint
and route the tether under
the head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Second Row
The center seat position in the second row has a
lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. For
instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a
lap-shoulder belt see, Securing a Child Restraint in
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Third Row
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, and the position that you are
using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
on page 1-59.
The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
on page 1-59.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
In addition, your vehicle may have the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat
or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
this including important safety information.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-82. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
has a top tether.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and
stay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the
key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver, a frontal
airbag for the right front passenger, a side impact
airbag for the driver, and a side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or
deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment
is about 10 to 16 mph (16 to 25 km/h), and the
threshold level for a full deployment is about
20 to 30 mph (32 to 48 km/h). (The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can
be somewhat above or below this range.)
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Vehicle’s with dual stage airbags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would
not likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel, the instrument panel, and
the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door.
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the
airbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, and rear impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Airbags
should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the frontal
airbags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for
vehicles with a side impact airbag.
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module may
be hot for a short time. These components include
the steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and
the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. For side impact airbags, the side of the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door may be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not too
hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
mirror does not have either of the indicators pictured,
then your vehicle does not have the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
1-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
CAUTION: (Continued)
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
1-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
CAUTION: (Continued)
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for a frontal
airbag, or an airbag covering on a seatback,
the airbag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,
both the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both
the airbag module and seatback for seating
positions with a side impact airbag. Do not open or
break the airbag coverings.
1-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
{CAUTION:
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
1-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
1. This device may not cause interference.
In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may be
able to have your doors unlocked automatically with the
OnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®
on page 2-36.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
K (Unlock): Press this
button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The
interior lamps will come
on. Pressing unlock again
within three seconds
will cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and
page 3-63 for more information.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Q (Lock): Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You
can choose different feedback options for each press
of the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock
page 3-63 for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,
by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The
receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)
side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following this information.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
To unlock the door from the outside, use the keyless
entry system or the key.
Door Locks
To unlock or lock the door
from the inside, slide the
manual lever forward
or rearward.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use.
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Press
the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock
all of the doors immediately. See Delayed Locking
on page 2-9 for more information.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
2. Move the lever forward to engage the rear door
security lock.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
programming.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when
this feature is in use. If you want to open the rear
door while the security lock is engaged, unlock the door
and open the door from the outside. Move the lever
rearward to disengage the child security lock feature.
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.
Lockout Protection
This feature is located
on the inside edge of the
rear doors.
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlock the liftgate and liftgate glass from the outside
use either the power door locks or the remote keyless
entry system.
Liftgate/Liftglass
The liftgate glass can be opened using the pushbutton
on the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked.
{CAUTION:
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
To lock the liftgate and liftgate glass from the outside
use the remote keyless entry system or the power
door locks.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Windows
Power Windows
The driver and front passenger windows also have an
express-down feature that allows the windows to
be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully
on the window switch, then release, to activate the
express-down mode. This mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, press the switch to the first position until
the window is at the desired position.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout switch to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows
from their switches. A light in the lockout switch will
come on to show that the switch has been activated.
Press the lockout switch again to return to normal
operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-17.
The driver’s door also has a switch for each of the
passenger’s windows.
Press the top of the switch to lower the window.
Pull up the top of the switch to raise the window.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun
visor from the center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
rod from side-to-side in this position also.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster. See
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
page 3-47 for additional
information.
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Pull the sun visor
extender out for additional coverage. Detach the sun
visor from the center mount and swing it to the side to
cover the side window.
To activate the theft-deterrent system, do the following:
1. Close all the doors.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light should come on
and flash.
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun
visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, but a door is open, you may hear
three chimes indicating delayed locking is enabled.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information. Close the door and the content
theft-deterrent system will be activated.
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter
or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to
START.
If a locked door is opened without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or OnStar, if equipped with an
active subscription, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s
lamps will flash and the horn will sound for about
two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery power. If
this occurs, you can turn off the alarm by pressing unlock
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the
key in the ignition and turning it to START.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2. Wait for the security light to go out.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
you can customize your alarm warning. See DIC Vehicle
3. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
The horn may chirp for 10 seconds before the alarm
goes off if the theft-deterrent system is activated using
the remote keyless entry transmitter and the driver’s
door is opened. If this occurs, you can turn off the alarm
by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and
turning it to START.
4. Turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in
the ignition and turning it to START.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, see your dealer for service.
• Always unlock a door with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse. See
dealer for service.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as
the radio in the accessory ignition position may
drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from
starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to
LOCK or until one of the doors is opened.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control.
This feature assists in starting the engine and protects
the electrical system. This feature may cause the
engine to crank even after the ignition key is not
in START.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter
motor, cause your battery to be drained much
sooner, and add excessive heat that can damage
your starter motor. Try not to hold the key in START
for longer than 15 seconds and wait about
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move closer to you for better pedal reach. This
feature can be programmed to work with the memory
function (if equipped) on your vehicle. See Memory Seat
on page 2-47.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The buttons used to adjust
the pedals are located on
the driver’s side door
panel.
Press the button closest to you to move the pedals
closer to you. Press the button farthest from you to move
the pedals away from you.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
located within the instrument panel cluster.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-44.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
{CAUTION:
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-24. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift into
DRIVE (D).
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the vehicle will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul Mode
Your vehicle is equipped
with a tow/haul mode. The
button for this feature is
located on the end of
the column shift lever.
You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
The tow/haul mode also interacts with the Road Sensing
Suspension (RSS) feature to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Road Sensing
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-53.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-24.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
{CAUTION:
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
page 4-53.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Mirrors
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays
a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”
is displayed for north-east.
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and the OnStar® system.
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer for more information on the
services OnStar® provides.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to
account for compass variance, your compass could give
false readings.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left
button, located below the mirror face, for up to three
seconds to turn the feature on and off. A light on
the mirror will be lit while the feature is turned on.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your zone
number, release the button. After about
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed. The
number shown is the current zone number.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not,
press and hold the on/off button for approximately
six seconds until the green light comes on,
indicating that the mirror is in automatic
dimming mode.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will
return.
Compass Variance
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please see your GM dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Mirror Operation
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
For more information, see Passenger Sensing System
on page 3-36.
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left
button, located below the mirror face, for up to three
seconds to turn the feature on and off. A light on
the mirror will be lit while the feature is turned on.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays
a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”
is displayed for north-east.
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to
account for compass variance, your compass could give
false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed. The
number shown is the current zone number.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Folding Mirrors
Outside Power Mirrors
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the
mirrors. The mirror will adjust as it folds in and will
reposition itself once it is unfolded.
The controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, the mirrors need to be reset. See “Resetting
the Power Folding Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
The power folding mirrors will need to be reset if:
• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror to be adjusted, then press the dots,
located below the selector switch on the four-way control
pad, to adjust the direction of each mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function which
works in conjunction with the memory seats. See
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
at least three times using the mirror controls. This will
reset them to their normal detent position.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
The button to turn the
heated mirrors on or off is
located on the climate
control panel.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat. It makes things in the mirror appear
farther away than they really are.
Press this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice,
snow, and condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
with Curb View Assist
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Your vehicle’s mirrors will also be capable of performing
the curb view assist mirror function. This feature will
cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing
you to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we
can request emergency services be sent to your
location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar®
at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they will get you the help
you need.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or
driver’s mirror will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory as
the tilt position.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-63 for more information.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Services
The OnStar® Directions and Connections Plan is
included on new vehicles for the first year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year to meet your needs. For more information,
press the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
Directions and Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Universal Home Remote
System
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used
to interact with OnStar®.
Controls on page 3-103
for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory
numbers, press the control, wait for the “number
please” response, say the number(s) to be dialed, wait
for the number(s) to be repeated and then say “dial.”
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
See the OnStar® User’s Guide for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete
the programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders for the front
and rear passengers.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
The cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers and on the rear of the center console
for the rear passengers.
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
To use the front cupholders, press down on the access
door and release. The door will then open. Push the
door back down to close it.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
The front cupholder may be removed for cleaning by
pushing down and then back on the cupholder.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a heated and
cooled front cupholders.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
Perform the following procedure to use your front
cupholders:
Storage Areas
1. Place the provided beverage container in the cup
holder.
Glove Box
2. Press the top (red dot) of the switch to heat the cup
holder or press the bottom (blue dot) of the switch
to cool the cup holder. Press the same switch
again to turn off the cup holder.
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you dim your interior lights to the lowest setting, the
cupholder will automatically shutoff. This prevents
the cupholder from being on when the indicator light
may be too dim to see. To use your cupholder, adjust
the interior lights to a brighter setting.
The console may be equipped with an accessory power
page 3-22.
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the door
located on the back of the console.
Luggage Carrier
Your rear seat armrest, if equipped, may also contain
cupholders.
You can load things on top of your vehicle if it has this
feature.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and may have crossrails which can be
moved back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load
to the siderails or siderail supports.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a closed storage area on the
instrument panel above the compact disc changer. You
can open the storage area by pressing in the bottom
of the lid and the lid will automatically raise up.
Press down on the lid to close the storage area.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-46.
To open it, press the button on the side of the console
and swing the console lid open.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. If plywood is
used, tie it to the siderail supports.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle’s second row seat may have an
armrest/storage compartment.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from
sliding. To move a crossrail, turn the release knobs,
on both sides of the rail, counterclockwise to
loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired position
balancing the force side to side. Turn the release
knobs, on both sides of the rail, clockwise to tighten
it and try to slide the crossrail back and forth
slightly to be sure it is tight.
Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower the
armrest.
To open the compartment, if equipped, push the button
on the front of the armrest and pull the top open.
Convenience Net
The convenience net (if equipped) in the rear of your
vehicle helps to keep small loads in place during sharp
turns or quick stops and starts.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load
so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are
damaged.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the cover from the vehicle, do the following:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
Cargo Cover
2. Then, grasping the passenger’s side cover endcap,
push the cover endcap toward the driver’s side of
the vehicle. The endcap should lock in the
compressed position.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
3. Lift the cover up on the passenger’s side, swing the
cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle.
To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the
cover holder tab into the slot in the driver’s side
trim panel.
If you have a cargo cover, you can use it to cover items
in the cargo area of your vehicle.
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it
next to the passenger’s side trim panel slot.
To use the cover, do the following:
4. Push the button on top of the passenger’s side
endcap. This will allow the cover to extend into
the trim slot.
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
on the cargo area trim panels.
5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure it is
secure.
To return the cover to the retracted position, do the
following:
On some models there are two slots. The slots
furthest forward allow the cover to be used if the
third seat is removed or folded down.
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Tie Downs
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be
equipped with cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow you
to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition
needs to be on or RAP needs to be active. See
page 2-17.
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of
the way.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To stop the express-open motion,
press the front or rear of the button again. To close
the glass panel, press and hold the front of the button.
The glass will not be fully seated unless the button
is held until the glass stops moving. With the sunroof
closed, press the forward side of the button to open the
sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed, the
glass panel can be closed or opened.
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls
for the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracks.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof. To
do this, start the vehicle and press the forward side of
the sunroof button until the glass panel moves to a fully
closed position. Release, and press again to move to
the vent position, which occurs when the sunroof is fully
tilted upward and the button is held for an additional
twenty seconds. This will reset the memory and enable
the sunroof to function properly.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, both the driver’s and
passenger’s outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake
pedals for vehicles with the adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature. The settings for these features can
be saved for up to two drivers.
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the settings, do the following:
To store the seat exit position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’s
seat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, and
side wing area, both of the outside mirrors, and the
throttle and brake pedals to your preference.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button (1 or 2).
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• If this feature is activated in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), removing the key from the ignition
will move the seat to the exit position.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-63 for more information on activating this
feature in the DIC.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when exiting
or entering the vehicle. The seat position can be
saved for up to two drivers.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-44
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-15.
page 2-23.
D. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons. See
page 3-99.
on page 2-43.
R. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Disable Button. See
page 3-20.
page 3-19.
page 3-10.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column under the turn signal lever.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
page 3-9.
page 3-10.
on page 3-10.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
message off, move the turn signal lever to the off
position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
cluster will also be on.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
{CAUTION:
N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
= (Washer Fluid): To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
If your vehicle has a rear
window washer/wiper, this
knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
R (On): This position activates the system.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed. If
the accelerator pedal is held longer than
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• Move the cruise control switch to off.
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
• If road conditions cause StabiliTrak® to activate,
cruise control will turn off.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak® system activate, if
your vehicle is equipped with either feature.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position and release it
to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRL. To
turn any lamps back on when in the off mode, turn the
knob to the desired lamp mode. To return to the
AUTO mode, turn the knob to the off position and
release it. The off or AUTO mode will also cancel and
the lamps will return to the AUTO when the vehicle
is turned off. This mode is not available for vehicles sold
in Canada.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put the
system into automatic headlamp mode. The Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is light
enough outside.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. You can change this delay time using the
You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on,
Headlamps on Reminder
• the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,
• the transmission is not in PARK (P), and
• the light sensor determines it is daytime.
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when your
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and
your key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turn
the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on. In
the AUTO mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition
is in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delay
ends (if enabled in the DIC).
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system will
turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. Turning off the automatic headlamp system
with the headlamp switch is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
you can turn off the automatic headlamp system
when parked at night by applying the parking brake
before starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remain
off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are
parked. If you release the parking brake, the lights will
turn on. If the parking brake is not released before
you begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above
2 mph (3.2 km/h).
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights and the radio display. This will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
near the button when the fog lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door,
and will turn off when all doors are closed.
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to turn it on or off. The lamps
can be adjusted to point in the direction you want.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, all
the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn on or off, press the button located next
to the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
E (Dome Override): Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off even
while a door is opened. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and it will return to
the out position. In this position, the dome lamps
will come on when you open a door.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in
LOCK. This will keep your battery from running down.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exit
feature.
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
near the rear window.
It has three color-coded
lights used to provide
distance and system
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is
designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such as
parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects up
to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rear bumper.
information to the driver.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located
at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the
object.
URPA can be turned off by
pressing the rear park aid
disable button located
near the climate control
system and radio. You will
not see any lights on
the rear display if URPA is
turned off.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
{CAUTION:
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When
the system turns on, the three lights on the display
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know
that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
the red light will flash to remind you that the system
does not work at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate
above typical backing speeds of 3 mph
(5 km/h) while parking. And, the system does
not detect objects that are more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
1 ft
0.3 m
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate
level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize
an object, it must be within detection range behind the
vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle is equipped with many accessory power
outlets.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
One outlet is located in the center console. Press the
button on the side of the console door to access
the outlet.
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
your dealer.
There may also be accessory power outlets located on
the back of the center console above the cupholder
and in the rear cargo area on the passenger side.
Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the
accessory outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
cargo area during your last drive cycle, the light
may also flash red. The light will continue to flash
whenever in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven
forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any
obstructions behind the vehicle.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power plugs.
page 5-101.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
The front ashtray and lighter are located in the center
console near the cupholders, if equipped. Press on
the access door to open it and use the ashtray
and lighter.
To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button to the lower left
corner of the clock.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Release the button before you
get to the desired time.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
To remove the ashtray, pull it from the center console.
Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This
is possible since outside air will always flow through the
system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is
set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The
air conditioning compressor will run when the
outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The
air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s
hot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down
your vehicle. The light on the button will illuminate
in recirculation.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings
are the same when AUTO is pressed, the
temperature setting and both arrows will be
displayed for five seconds along with the automatic
air delivery mode and fan speed. After the
five-second update, the display will change to show
the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional
five seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature
the same as the driver’s press and hold the
AUTO button for about four seconds.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch
will override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly press
the button until the desired mode appears on the
display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
H (Panel): This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This setting will deliver warmer air to
Manual Operation
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
6 (Floor): This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
w9x (Fan): The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The
snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the
A/C is on and will turn off when the air conditioning is off.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning to be effective will make the
snowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off
to let you know that the air conditioning mode is
not available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside
temperature drops below a temperature which is too
cool for air conditioning to be effective, the snowflake
symbol will turn off to let you know that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function, press
the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,
the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you
know that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the
system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool
and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you select
A/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation, the
A/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/C
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost.
compressor will still run to help prevent fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the
temperature knob to the desired setting.
Defogging and Defrosting
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this setting.
This setting will deliver air to the floor and windshield
outlets. Recirculation is not available in this mode.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
0 (Defrost): Press this button to defrost the
windshield. The system will automatically control the fan
speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on
the side of your instrument panel that allow you to
adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the
vehicle. Move the louvers up or down. Use the
thumbwheel next to or underneath the outlet to close
the louvers. For the most efficient airflow and
temperature control, keep the outlet in the fully opened
position.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
This button activates the heated mirrors.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to turn the rear climate
control system off.
Rear Climate Control System
With this system the front or rear passengers can
control the air temperature, air flow and fan speed for
the rear seat passengers. The front overhead console
and the rear controls are used to adjust the climate.
9(Fan): To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan
knob located on the left side of the control panel to the
desired setting. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
Driver Overhead Control
°F (°C): To adjust the air temperature, turn the
temperature knob on the center of the control panel. For
cooler or warmer air turn the knob counterclockwise
toward 66°F (19°C) or clockwise toward 82°F (27°C).
To regulate the airflow direction, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor
vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent
airflow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The knob
can be set to any blend setting. Choose AUTO if
you want the system to automatically regulate the
airflow. See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
Front Controls - United States shown,
Canada similar
AUX: Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to allow the rear seat
passengers to have control over the rear climate control
system. See “Rear Passenger Console Control” later
for more information.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Passenger Console Control
% (Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery
mode and AUTO mode. Choose AUTO if you want
the system to automatically regulate the airflow.
See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
To use the rear climate control from the rear passenger
position, use the rear passenger console control. The
driver overhead control fan knob must be set to the AUX
position.
b (Temperature): Press this button up or down to
increase or decrease the temperature setting.
w9x(Fan): Press this button up or down to adjust
the fan speed. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
AUTO Mode
When using the system in auto mode, find your comfort
setting by placing the temperature control to 74°F
(23°C) and allowing about 20 minutes for the system to
regulate. Then adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If you choose full cold 60°F (15°C), the
system will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If
you choose full hot 90°F (32°C), the system will remain
at the maximum heat setting.
Rear Controls
The rear seat controls have the following settings:
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear seat
comfort controls on or off when the front overhead
control is set to AUX.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
more information on driver and passenger safety
belt reminders.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has a passenger sensing system,
your rearview mirror will have a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
page 3-35.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
The charging system light
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and
high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
When this light comes on the DIC will also display the
battery not charging message. See DIC Warnings
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try
to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will
sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
page 4-52.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then
page 3-39.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Traction Off Light
This light and a chime will
come on along with the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
message in the DIC
when one or more of your
tires is significantly
If you have the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light should come on briefly
when you turn the
ignition to RUN.
under-inflated.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
This light will also come on briefly when you start the
engine.
See “CHECK TIRE PRESSURE” under DIC Warnings
For more information on the traction off light, see
Stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on
page 5-57 for more information on your vehicle’s tires.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 180°F (82°C) to about
200°F (93°C).
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display a
TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission
will enter a transmission protection mode. When
the transmission enters the protection mode, you may
notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
further information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC will
display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message
and a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off the
roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the
engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls
below 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues
to operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact your
nearest dealer or the Roadside Assistance Center. See
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer,
• hot outside air temperatures,
• hauling a large or heavy load,
• low transmission fluid level,
• high transmission fluid level,
• restricted air flow to the radiator.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
page 3-54.
Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
The light will stay on until
the engine starts.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
on page 2-16.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
additional information regarding the security light.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
Fuel Gage
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
page 5-4.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the steering wheel.
The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer, fuel economy, customization features, and
warning/status messages.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge DIC messages and clear
them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure for vehicles
with a tire pressure monitor, timer, and engine hours.
t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display the
current range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. If
you press and hold the reset stem or the select
button for four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES, TIMER, and ENGINE
HOURS.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
Tire Pressures: The tire pressure mode is available
only on vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor.
Press the trip information button until TIRE
PRESSURES appears on the display. This mode shows
the tire pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the select button to scroll
through the following information:
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
driver’s side tire.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
passenger’s side tire.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
driver’s side tire.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
passenger’s side tire.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average
fuel economy, and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
is low.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until
ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This
mode shows the total number of hours the engine has
run. Pressing and holding the reset stem located on
the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also
display the engine hour information after the odometer is
displayed when the vehicle is off.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
Customization Button
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
4 (Customization): Press the customization button to
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to
change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will reset the trip odometers
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
DIC Warnings and Messages
On some vehicles, if the battery is not charging during
operation, this message will appear on the DIC.
Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Have
the electrical system checked by your GM dealer as
soon as possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons
or the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message
from the DIC display. See Charging System Light
Warning messages are displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
may be needed by the driver to correct the condition.
If there is more than one message that needs to
be displayed they will appear one after another. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press any of the four DIC buttons on the
steering wheel or the trip odometer reset stem on
the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you
received the messages and to clear them from the
display. Some messages cannot be cleared from the
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be removed from the
DIC display. You should take any messages that appear
on the display seriously and remember that clearing
the messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
BUCKLE PASSENGER
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, this
message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, this
message reminds you to buckle the driver’s seat
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging system, this message
will appear on the DIC, a chime will sound, and the
charging system light on the instrument panel cluster will
Driving with this problem could drain your battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the
electrical system checked by your GM dealer
immediately.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your seat belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on
and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled, this
message and chime will not come on.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster. See
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset
stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the
additional information.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
to reset the message. This message will clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If a low tire pressure is detected in any of the vehicle’s
tires, this message will appear on the DIC, along
with a chime and a low tire pressure warning light. See
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. It will appear at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure.
If the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
in a drive gear, this message will appear on the
display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
more information on tires and the correct inflation
pressures.
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Turn off the air conditioning. If
the message is still on, or if the engine coolant
temperature gage continues to rise, pull the vehicle over
when it is safe to do so. See Engine Coolant
Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK (P)
for a few minutes to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to a safe operating
temperature. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or
the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer reservoir will clear the message. See Windshield
DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next ignition cycle.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-24 for more information.
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear
on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. It will also clear
itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle. The
low fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain on
page 5-4.
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the display for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC
page 5-11 for more information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN, this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear
a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed and you will hear a chime
when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and
the engine further enters the engine coolant protection
information.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
You may also see this message when the vehicle
determines a problem with the electronic throttle control.
See your GM dealer for service.
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear on
the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
page 5-107. If the message returns after replacing the
fuse, see your GM dealer for service.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE AIR BAG
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed and
the vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will
If there is a problem with the airbag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
page 1-74. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or
the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop
and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles,
and close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE 4WD (Four-Wheel-Drive)
If a problem occurs with the brake system, this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If you have all-wheel-drive and a problem occurs with
the all-wheel-drive system, this message will appear on
the DIC. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when you
begin driving, the all-wheel-drive system needs service.
See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comes on, it
means there is a problem. You should see your
GM dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so
reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery
charging system, this message will appear on the
DIC. Under certain conditions, the charging system light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See
will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle
will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode. The
vehicle is safe to drive, however you should have the
electrical system checked by your GM dealer. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, see
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message will be displayed if any of the tire monitor
sensors have malfunctioned, if the tire monitor sensors
have not been programmed or if the recommended
tire pressures are not programmed. See your GM dealer
for service. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or
the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. See your GM dealer.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display.
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you are steering.
SERVICE STABILITY
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, see
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, it
means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message try to reset the system.
Stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITY SYS (System) DISABLED
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the StabiliTrak® button, or when
the stability control has been automatically disabled.
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel. See Malfunction Indicator
page 5-6. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light and message off.
There are four conditions that can cause this message
to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message will also be displayed if the brake
system warning light is on. See Brake System
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
more information.
• The message could be displayed if the stability
system takes longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
• Also, if an engine or vehicle related problem has
been detected, and the vehicle needs service,
the message will appear. See your GM dealer.
TRACTION SYS (System) LIMITED
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
If the brake traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
The system will return to normal operation after the
page 4-9 for more information.
For more information on the StabiliTrak® system, see
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
TRANSMISSION HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, this
message will appear on the DIC display.
If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot,
this message will appear on the DIC along with a
continuous chime. Driving with the transmission fluid
temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop
the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to
cool. This message will clear and the chime will
stop when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the Tow/Haul mode, use this feature if
the transmission is operating at higher temperatures
and/or the following situations exist, which can cause the
transmission to operate at higher temperatures:
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
• Towing a trailer
• Hot outside air temperatures
• Hauling a large or heavy load
• Over-loading
message and clear it from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
• Low transmission fluid level
• High transmission fluid level
• Restricted air flow to the radiator
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only
the options available will be displayed on your Driver
Information Center (DIC).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the transmission your vehicle is
equipped with for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals. Also see Transmission Temperature Gage
on page 3-42 for more information.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the
customization button to scroll through the available
customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while
LOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
Door Lock Delay
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter and a door or
the liftgate is open, the delayed locking feature will delay
locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after
the last door is closed.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference for
automatic unlocking, press the select button while
UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until DOOR LOCK
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for delayed locking, press the select button
while DOOR LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors will
lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the lock button
on the door or the remote keyless entry transmitter a
second time.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Lock Feedback
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears in the display. To select your preference for
the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the select
button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Curb View
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Seat
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your preference for
seat position exit, press the select button while
EASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
page 2-47.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside
page 2-36.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Warning
Language
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING
appears in the display. To select your preference for
alarm warning, press the select button while ALARM
WARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
To select your preference for display language, press
the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
• ENGLISH
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four
seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and get
familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can use it
with less effort, as well as take advantage of its
features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio
system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
stations using the presets and steering wheel controls
(if equipped).
Display Units
Press the customization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric, press
the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH
• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon. If you choose metric, all
information will be displayed in metric units. For
example, distance in kilometers and fuel economy in
liters per 100 kilometers.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the customizable options.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Setting the Time
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the MN button
until the correct minute appears on the display. The time
can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME appears on the display. To accept this time, press
and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,
for another two seconds. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with Cassette and CD
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order
to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): If your vehicle is
equipped with a Bose® audio system, it includes Bose
AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. When
turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio
system equalization, to compensate for background
noise, so that your music always sounds the same at the
set volume level.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through your vehicle’s
audio system. At higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the background noise, there
may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume at a low to
moderate listening level. Begin listening while the vehicle
is stopped with the motor running; turn the AudioPilot®
on by pressing the AUTO VOL button until AVOL
ON appears on the display. Then, resume driving,
gradually increasing the vehicle speed. You will notice
that your music sounds the same regardless of
background noises; such as road noise, tire hum, or
wind. With the AudioPilot® turned off, repeat this process
again without adjusting the volume or tone controls.
you will notice that background noise is now audible,
and will prevent you from hearing softer passages of the
music. To turn AudioPilot® off, press AUTO VOL until
AVOL OFF appears on the display. For additional
information on AudioPilot®, please visit www.bose.com.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display
will now be the default.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to enhance the audio performance for different
passengers in the vehicle.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
The setting last chosen will appear on the display when
you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press this
button, another setting will appear on the display and
AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings listed.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position while
it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The
radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level
to the middle position.
The audio system allows you to choose from four
different equalization settings: normal, driver, rear and
spacious. These settings can be used while listening to
the radio, cassette or the CD player.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall vehicle
sound quality for all seating locations.
DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best sound
quality.
REAR: This setting gives the rear seat passengers the
best sound quality.
SPACIOUS: This setting makes the listening space
seem larger.
The radio can save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle
position and the display will show the speaker balance.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either TYPE or SEEK
arrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, go back
to Step 1.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, the tape can be inserted,
but will not play until the ignition and radio are on. If
the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can
be inserted and will begin playing.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop and eject a
tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
CD Adapter Kits
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go
to the beginning of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If this pushbutton is
held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-105 for more information.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop and eject a CD
when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current radio
source will stop and the DVD sound will come through
the speakers.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC
button, if a cassette tape or a CD is loaded, or press the
BAND button to select a different source.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and the radio will display
RSE OFF. The radio will return to the last radio
source that you were listening to.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active. See
more information.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only. The
driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphones
Your vehicle may have the Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE
system includes a DVD player, a video display screen,
two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
control.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
To turn the headphones off activate the ON/OFF
control.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may be
lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
When using the wired headphones, if the front
seat passengers use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for XM™, instead
of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through
the RSE.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam ear
pads that can be replaced.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The
yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may become
worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads can
become damaged if they are not handled or stored
properly. If the foam ear pads do become damaged or
worn out, the pads can be replaced separately from
the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace
the complete headphone set.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be
ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more information.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the
radio if the RSE system power is on. Once the
RSE system is selected as an audio source on the
radio, adjust the speaker volume on the radio, if
necessary. If the RSE system power is not on, the RSE
system will not be an available source on the radio.
Refer to the radio information for the radio that
your vehicle has for more information.
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the Rear Seat Audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console. The
DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button located on the
DVD display console.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and adjust its
position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will
continue to play through the previous audio or video
source.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
The video screen contains the IR transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote
control. If the screen is in the closed position, the
signals will not be available for the operation of the
headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers use XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if
equipped), you will hear the audio for XM™, instead of
the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
DVD Player Buttons
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
If your vehicle has the third row video screen, press the
set-up menu button twice, to access the set-up menu.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping and Resume Playback
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start, if
the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAP is
active.
Ejecting a Disc
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or previews. Some DVDs
will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the
on-screen instructions.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button, to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
\ (Clear): Press this button, within three seconds
after inputting a number to clear the number(s).
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Problem
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The language in the audio Check the audio or
or on the screen
is wrong.
The remote control does
not work.
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored in
it was pulled back into the the DVD player. Press the
DVD player.
eject button again to eject
the disc.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
the DVD starts where I
DVD player will resume
or buzzes.
range and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD
the beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
The audio/video skips or
jumps.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from XM™ has The RSE is working
taken over the audio from correctly.
the DVD or CD when
using the wired
headphones.
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Cleaning the Video Screen
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control the
sources that the front seat passengers are not
listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
listen to and control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs
through the headphones while the driver listens to the
radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
DVD Distortion
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will
not be able to control the source. You can operate the
rear seat audio when the main radio is off.
There may be an experience with audio distortion
in the wireless headphones when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the left
headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
x SEEK w: When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM,
press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or previous selection. This
function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to a cassette tape.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped with
the Bose® audio system.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the
main radio. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
CD Changer
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a
cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
beginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
The CD changer plays up to six standard size CDs
continuously. Individual CDs may be loaded or ejected
into or from any position.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
An amber light on each numbered button indicates a
CD is loaded in the respective position. A green light on
a numbered button indicates that a CD is playing.
When loading CDs, the loading slot indicators turn green
to indicate that the player is ready to accept a CD.
CDs can be loaded or ejected with the radio or
the ignition off.
You must load CDs with the label side up. If you do not,
the player will automatically eject the CDs.
Notice: Loading CDs with adhesive labels will
damage the player.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load a CD, perform the following steps:
To eject a single CD, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOAD button. Available positions will
blink green.
1. Press the eject button (upward pointing arrow). The
buttons with loaded CDs will blink green.
2. Select a position by pressing the numbered button
with the green blinking light. If a button is not
pressed within five seconds, the changer will go to
the lowest available position.
2. Press one of the green blinking buttons to select
the location of the CD you want to eject. The
changer will move to that location and eject the CD.
If you do not remove the CD from the player
within 25 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the eject
button is pressed and a numbered location button is
not pressed within five seconds, the current or
last played CD will be ejected.
3. Load the CD when the loading slot indicators turn
green. An internal door will open allowing a single
CD to be inserted into the changer. After
approximately 10 seconds the changer will be ready
to play.
To eject all CDs, press and hold the eject button.
To play a CD, perform one of the following:
To load two or more CDs, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button. The first CD
will be loaded into the lowest numbered empty
position.
• With the radio on, press the numbered button with
an amber indicator light on the CD changer.
• Press the TAPE CD button on the radio. The CD
changer will go to its last played position.
2. Load a single CD when the loading slot indicators
turn green. After about 10 seconds the changer will
cycle to the next available position.
3. Repeat Step 2 until all CDs are loaded into all of
the desired positions. If you do not wish to load all
of the positions, cancel loading by pressing and
releasing the load button or wait 25 seconds for the
changer to time out.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 RDM (Random): Press and release this pushbutton
to hear all of the tracks on all of the loaded CDs in
random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ALL
will appear on the display.
CD Functions
All of the CD changer functions are performed by the
radio, except for loading and ejecting.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
Press and hold this pushbutton to hear the tracks on the
current CD in random, rather than sequential order.
You will hear a beep and RDM ONE will appear on the
display. Press this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track,
play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the player for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a CD, if a CD is
loaded in the changer and the radio is on.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to select a CD. The
CD number and track number will appear on the
display.
Press this button to switch between playing a tape and
a CD in the CD changer, if both are loaded.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD Changer Errors
CHK CD (Check): If this message appears on the
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on
the display.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
• The CD player is very hot.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
CD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on
the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
g (OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar, press
this button to interact with the OnStar system. See
more information.
to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
to silence the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the
cut tape detection feature will be active again.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diversity Antenna System
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Your AM-FM antennas are located in the rear side
windows. Be sure that the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the
glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are
damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside of the windshield or rear window may
affect radio reception or damage the rear window
defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not clear the inside windshield or rear
window with sharp objects.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Chime Level Adjustment
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be
covered by your warranty.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level. To
change the volume level of the chime, press and
hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio
power off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio
display. To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
telephone antenna over the grid lines.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• Judgment
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
page 4-9.
{CAUTION:
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Road Sensing Suspension
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
The Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature provides
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
engaged, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better ride
and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking or multiple turns during the
first two miles of driving after starting your vehicle, the
STABILITY SYS DISABLED message may appear.
If this is the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.
You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restart
it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either message appears on
the Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehicle
hasn’t gone through hard acceleration, braking or
multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. It means that an
advanced computer-controlled system has come on to
help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which
you’re steering. StabiliTrak® activates when the
computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to
spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery
spot on the road. When the system activates, you
may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal.
This is normal. When the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
message is on, you should continue to steer in
the direction you want to go. The system is designed to
help you in bad weather or other difficult driving
situations by making the most of whatever road
conditions will permit. For more information on the
stability messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-50.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light will
illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
both the stability system and part of the traction
page 3-41 for more information. Your vehicle will
still have brake-traction control when StabiliTrak® is off,
but will not be able to use the engine speed
management system. See “Traction Control Operation”
next for more information.
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
StabiliTrak® and part of
the traction control system
can be turned off or
back on by pressing the
StabiliTrak® button located
on the instrument panel.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly or
if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed braking,
brake traction-control will be disabled and the TRACTION
SYS LIMITED message will be displayed. In the limited
mode, the traction control system will only use engine
traction-control and is limited in its ability to provide
optimal performance since the system will not utilize
brake traction-control to control slip on the drive wheels.
The system will return to normal operation after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or
longer depending on brake usage.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel spin
by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine
speed management) and by applying brakes to each
individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled. In
this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control to activate
constantly. For more information on the traction active
page 3-50.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the traction off, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITY
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If
you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When road conditions allow you to use cruise again,
you may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
when extra traction is needed.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
on page 4-9.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have StabiliTrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center. See
“Stability System Active Message” under DIC Warnings
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that if your passenger side outside
mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may
seem to be farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Off-roading” means you have left the North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked.
Curves are not banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill. In
short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have all-wheel
drive. If your vehicle does not have all-wheel drive or if it
has 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies, you should not
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide. You will
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will
help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Many of the same design features that help make
your vehicle responsive on paved roads during
poor weather conditions — features like all-wheel
drive — help make it much better suited for off-road
use. Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle
step over some off-road obstacles. But your vehicle
does not have features like special underbody shielding
and a transfer case low gear range, things that are
usually thought necessary for extended or severe
off-road service.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if equipped, are properly attached. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the
local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{CAUTION:
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
• You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can
block your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,
or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Use the headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way you will be able to tell if the wheels
are straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with the wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up
the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do?
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If the engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill you must back straight
down the hill.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
may be too steep to drive across. When you
go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track
width — the distance between the left and
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.” The
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
right wheels — may not prevent the vehicle from
tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline
puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This
could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it — a rock, a
rut, etc. — and roll over.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt
even more.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might
have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe
is under water, you will never be able to start the
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when the brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
more information on driving through water.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles,
or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle
and other vehicle parts.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road
ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-57.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Freeway Driving
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they
have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
all levels?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
off-road.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more. See
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
For more information about using tire chains on your
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn the system off
by pressing the StabiliTrak® button so that the
STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the traction
off light are illuminated on the instrument panel
cluster. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do
page 4-52.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front of
the vehicle. You may need to use them if you are stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.
Recovery Hooks
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows
the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity
of your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center line.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Equipment
{CAUTION:
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you can carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you
buy and install the new equipment.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension comes as a
part of the Road Sensing Suspension. See Road
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
There is also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
page 4-17.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned
to LOCK. You may hear the air compressor operating
when the height is being adjusted.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the height.
See “Weight distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying
Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing
All-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with any of the
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
{CAUTION:
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” next.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press this button at the
end of the shift lever
to enable/disable the
tow/haul mode.
However, there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul
when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when
unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and
transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel
economy. Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling
a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
mode has been selected.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every
time it is started.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load or
with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy and
unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics, but will not cause damage.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following chart to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Escalade 2WD 6.0L
Escalade AWD 6.0L
Escalade ESV AWD 6.0L
Escalade ESV Platinum AWD 6.0L
Axle Ratio
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
Max. Trailer Wt.
**GCWR
7,400 lbs (3 356 kg)
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa,
Ontario L1H 8P7
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to the maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only
be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think
you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still
consider the effect on the rear axle. Because your
rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only
put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg)
by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue weight
is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer
weight, you can expect that the largest trailer your
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may add
300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle now
weighs:
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
Trailer Brakes
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your
trailer brake system cannot tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g.,
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at or near
sea level will boil at a lower temperature than at higher
altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately
after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your
vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably
on level ground) with the automatic transmission in
PARK (P) for at least five minutes before turning
the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking on Hills
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
{CAUTION:
• start your engine,
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire is
tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a
trailer.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Jumper
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside. But you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
page 4-53.
This harness may be included with your vehicle as part
of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-14.
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 in
Canada. Some gasolines may contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors
recommends against the use of gasolines containing
information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other
fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
page 3-44. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-44.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located inside the
vehicle to the lower
left of the steering
wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull down the hood and close
it firmly.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
on page 5-111.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC
page 5-27.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
page 5-38.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-116.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
the location of the
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
engine oil fill cap.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
I
t
oi
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
DIC, or do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction
indicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/
filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction
indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air
cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to.
the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter and
the air filter restriction
indicator, if equipped.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle using the steps following.
When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and
lift up the cover.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid
level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the
transmission breather hose to be sure it is clean and
unclogged. If readings are still inconsistent, contact
your dealer.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-24.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
{CAUTION:
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings and
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
The ENGINE COOLANT HOT message, along with a
low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the ENGINE COOLANT HOT message with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D).
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, park, and fast
idle your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice
as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes
while you are parked.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-11.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an electric engine cooling fan, idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Check the coolant
level after the system cools down. Some amount of
coolant may be lost due to overheating.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in
If your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine
cooling fan, check the coolant temperature gage. If the
coolant temperature is approximately 232°F (111°C),
the electric cooling fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
If your vehicle is equipped with an engine-driven cooling
fan, start the engine again and see if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the
accelerator pedal down. If it does not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Fan Noise
If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine
cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages, so you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It
is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The
fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, you
may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is
required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operating
your air conditioning system, the fans change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-10 for reservoir
location.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Your vehicle has a message that comes on when the
washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for
15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the
CHECK WASHER FLUID message is displayed, you
will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for more information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-13.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-38 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
location.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located near the
engine accessory drive
bracket. On some vehicles,
the terminal may be
covered by a red plastic
cover. To access the
remote positive (+)
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save your radio!
terminal, open the cover, if
equipped.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on
the battery.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located on the
engine accessory drive
bracket and is marked
GND (Ground).
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
for more information on the location of the
remote terminals.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
{CAUTION:
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminal
is marked GND.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover, if
equipped, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
Be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in
this section. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain
level. When checking the fluid level on any axle,
variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill
differences between the minimum and the maximum
fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven
before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle
tubes and has not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid
level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour
or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly must
be supported to get a true reading.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 5/8 inch to 1-5/8 inch (15 mm to
40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach
the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant:
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 1/2 inch (12 mm) to about
5/8 inch (18 mm) below the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim
has been preset at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on
the “0” (zero) marks on their scales.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you (for vertical aim).
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer
for service. However, it is possible for you to re-aim your
headlamps as described in the following procedure.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (H)
(left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming
procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only
vertical (V) (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical
aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx® screwdriver.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
To adjust the headlamp veritcal aiming, do the following:
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low beam lamp. Record this distance.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw (V) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you
may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamps
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
A. Low-Beam
D. High-Beam
Headlamp
Headlamp
B. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
E. Front Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
on page 5-9 for more information.
4. Pull the top left or right corner of the grill out so the
clips release. This will give you the needed
clearance for removing the headlamp assembly.
2. Pry up the eight fastener plugs on the radiator
cover and pull the fasteners out.
3. Lift off the radiator cover.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the horizontal pin from the headlamp
assembly by lifting the end of the pin upward
until it unsnaps and then pulling it toward the center
of the vehicle.
6. Remove the vertical pin from the headlamp
assembly by turning the end of the pin away from
you until it unsnaps and then pulling it upward.
7. Remove the headlamp assembly by lifting it up and
then pulling it out and away from the front of the
vehicle.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector from the lower
corner of the headlamp assembly. This will give you
better access to the headlamp assembly.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove the rubber,
circular-shaped bulb
cap of the affected bulb
from the headlamp
assembly.
10. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and
remove it with the old bulb from the headlamp
assembly.
13. Place the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle,
being sure to align the lower locator tab with the
pocket on the vehicle (see arrow). Push the
headlamp assembly straight in and then down into
position.
11. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
12. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb,
using care not to touch the bulb with your hands,
fingers or anything damp or oily.
14. Install the two pins and snap the ends into their
locked position.
15. Reinstall the grille and radiator cover by reversing
the removal procedure described previously.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a front turn signal, sidemarker or DRL bulb,
do the following:
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
more information.
2. Remove the rubber, circular-shaped bulb cap for
the affected bulb from the headlamp assembly.
3. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
assembly. (There is no lock for the sidemarker lamp.)
4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
6. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and
turn it clockwise until it locks. (There is no lock for
the sidemarker lamp.)
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
A. Low-Beam
D. High-Beam
Headlamp
Headlamp
B. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
E. Front Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
A. Turn Signal/Taillamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
2. Remove the taillamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp
assembly. The sidemarker lamp does not have a
release tab.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Install a new bulb into the socket and insert it into
the taillamp assembly
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise until it clicks. The
sidemarker lamp does not have a release tab and
therefore will not click when it is installed.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp, Rear Turn Signal,
Stoplamp and Taillamp
3157K
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Turn Signal Lamps
High-Beam Headlamp
Sidemarker Lamp
4114K
3157AK
9005 or 9005 LL
194
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-15.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch P275/55R20
size tires, they are classified as touring tires and
are designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide
tread design is not recommended for off-road driving.
information.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and
the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door lock post (striker). This label lists your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire
inflation pressures. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. For additional information
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
page 4-46.
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted on
each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
If your vehicle has P265/70R17 AL2 or P275/55R20 AL2
size tires and you will be driving at high speeds,
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low tire
pressure condition exists. This system also allows
the driver to check tire pressure levels using the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPMS displays the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the DIC, and at the same time illuminates
the low tire pressure warning symbol. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation
page 3-54.
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, that
the tire pressure monitor light, located on the
instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE message will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you start to drive
the vehicle. This could be an early indicator that the tire
pressures are getting low and need to be inflated to
the proper pressure.
Accordingly, When the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and
low tire pressure light (telltale) will appear at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire information
placard) shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64. For the location of the tire and loading
page 4-46.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
one minute, to match the first tire and wheel, or more
than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel
positions the matching process stops and you will need
to start over.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the headlamp switch from off to the parking
lamps setting four times within three seconds. A
double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire
warning light will begin to flash. The double horn
chirp and flashing TPMS warning light indicate that
the TPMS matching process has started. The
TPMS warning light should continue flashing
throughout the matching procedure. The SERVICE
TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has
Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. Each tire/wheel position is matched to a
sensor, by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel
positions in the following order: LF TIRE (left front tire on
the driver’s side of the vehicle), RF TIRE (right front
tire on the passengers side of the vehicle), RR
TIRE (right rear tire on the passengers side of the
vehicle), and LR TIRE (left rear tire on the driver’s side
of the vehicle).
4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, you will need to start over with Step 1.
To let air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed on the
DIC screen. This message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is displayed
when the TPMS is malfunctioning. One or more missing
or inoperable TPMS sensors will cause the service
tire monitor message to be displayed. See your dealer
for service.
6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the left
rear tire, check to see if the TPMS warning light is
still flashing. If it is, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK to exit the sensor matching process. If the
TPMS warning light is not flashing, the five
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
minute time limit has passed and you will need to
start the process over beginning with Step 1.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-76 for more information.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after
a tire rotation. See “TPMS Sensor Identification
page 5-66.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-78.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size,
brand, and type tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
page 5-58 for additional information.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare
than the road tires (those originally installed
on your vehicle). When new, your vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel assembly with
a similar overall diameter as your vehicle’s
road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive
on it. Because this spare was developed for
use on your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the rear
tires.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Models - Rear Access Panel
Extended Models
F. Mounting Bracket
A. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
D. Wheel Blocks
E. Jack
A. Knob
B. Removable
Storage Tray
G. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
F. Knob
C. Retaining Hook
D. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
E. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
H. Wheel Blocks
I. Jack
C. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the regular models, the equipment is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, behind the left trim panel
in the rear of the vehicle. Unlatch the release lever
to open the trim panel door. Skip the first step and follow
the last three.
On the extended models, the equipment you will need is
under the storage tray on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, in the trim panel.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. Remove the wing nut used to retain the tool kit by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
release the jack from its holder and to lower the
jack head.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
You will use the jack handle extensions and the
wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If Equipped)
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the lock if your
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire lock (J).
3. Insert the spare tire
end (open end) (F) of
the extension
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-89.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you to assist
in reaching the
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
spare tire.
6. Tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable when
the tire has been
lowered, so it can be
pulled up through
the wheel opening.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry the cap out.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Jack Positions (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown in
this step.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat
tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need
to use the jack handle and
both jack handle
extensions. Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack
handle extensions.
Attach the jack handle to
the jack. Use the
jacking pad provided on
the rear axle.
Rear Position
Front Position
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare.
Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is
held against the hub.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
8. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
{CAUTION:
wrench clockwise.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the
wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the
wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line
up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on
the wheel.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
page 5-92.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
to Step 6.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-80.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn
the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare the rest of the way.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and
pull it through the
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
wheel opening. Pull the
tire out from under
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If Equipped)
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper
and into the hoist
shaft.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Put the jack tools (B), in the tool bag and place in
the retaining clip above the jack (E).
2. Tighten down with the wing nut (A).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (D) and jack (E)
together with the wing nut (D) and knob (F).
4. Position the jack storage cover in the left rear side
panel and tighten, adjusting clockwise until the jack
is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure
to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the
pin in the mounting bracket.
Regular Models - Rear Access Panel
A. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
B. Jack Tools
D. Wheel Blocks
E. Jack
F. Knob
C. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Return the jack tools (E), to the tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel blocks (H) and jack (I) together
with the wing nut (G) and retaining hook (C).
3. Position under the jack storage tray (B) in the left
rear side panel below the wheelbase and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in
the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the
holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the
mounting bracket.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left
trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to
secure.
5. Return the storage tray (B) to its original location.
Extended Models
E. Jack Tools
A. Knob
B. Removable
Storage Tray
C. Retaining Hook
D. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
F. Mounting Bracket
G. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
H. Wheel Blocks
I. Jack
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires, those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Weatherstrips
Wood Panels
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-101.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is located on the
driver’s side edge of the
instrument panel. Pull
off the cover to access
the fuse block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
Fuses
RR Wiper
Usage
Rear Window Wiper Switch
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
SEO ACCY
WS WPR
TBC ACCY
IGN 3
Rear Heated Seats Module
Air Suspension
Switch/Module
4WD
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
HTR A/C
Climate Control System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
Cruise Control
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
Not Used
Brake Switch
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock, Powertrain Control
Module, Transmission
Truck Body Controller
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Harness Connector
Driver Door Module
Instrument Panel Outlets,
VEH STOP
LCK
RT TRLR ST/TRN
RT TRN
HVAC 1
LT DR
BODY
DDM
CRUISE
UNLCK
AUX PWR 2, M/GATE Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
RR FOG LP
BRAKE
Rear Doors and Liftgate
Power Lock Relay Feed
Liftgate, Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Truck Body Controller
Flasher Module
Left Rear Power Window
Circuit Breaker and Driver
Door Module
Truck Body Controller
Truck Body Controller
LCKS
DRIVER UNLCK
IGN 0
ECC TPM
TBC 2C
HAZRD
TBC IGN 0
CB LT DRS
VEH CHMSL
LT TRLR ST/TRN
LT TRN
TBC 2B
TBC 2A
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Device
Usage
Special Equipment
Option/Off-road Lamps
Harness Connector
Trailer Brake Wiring
Upfitter (Not Used)
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
BODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
Ride Control (Not Used)
Headliner Wiring Connector 2
Body Wiring Connector
Rear Defogger Relay
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
CB SEAT
Rear Right Power Window,
Passenger Door Module
CB RT DOOR
SPARE
INFO
Not Used
Not Used
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the
battery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Underhood Fuse Block
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
more information on its location.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*5 — Ignition 1
Fuses
STUD #2*
Usage
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Anti-lock Brakes
Automatic Level Control
(ALC) Compressor
ABS
VSES/ECAS
IGN A
IGN B
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
*6 — Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump.
*7 — Rear Climate Control.
*8 — Sunroof.
LBEC 1
TRL PARK
RR PARK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Fuses
GLOW PLUG
CUST FEED
HYBRID
Usage
Not Used
Gasoline Accessory Power
Not Used
LR PARK
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring
PARK LP
STRTR
Parking Lamps Relay
Starter Relay
STUD #1
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
Front Climate Control Fan
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules,
Door Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
INTPARK
STOP LP
Roof Marker Lamps
Stoplamps
Truck Body Controller Battery
Feed
Off-Road Lamps
Not Used
MBEC 1
BLWR
TBC BATT
SEO B2
4WS
LBEC 2
Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Console
AUX PWR
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Powertrain Control Module
Fuses
TBC IGN1
Usage
PCM 1
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Driver’s Side High Beam
Headlamp
Not Used
Daytime Running Lamps
Regulated Voltage Control
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
Climate Control Controller
Cigarette Lighter
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Headlamp
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relay
ETC/ECM
IGN E
HI HDLP-LT
Instrument Panel Cluster, Air
Conditioning Relay, Turn
Signal/Hazard Switch, Starter
Relay, Electronic Brake
LH HID
DRL
RVC
Controller TC2 Mode Switch
IPC/DIC
Electronic Suspension
Control, Automatic Level
Control (ALC) Exhaust
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Fuel Pump (Relay)
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Rear Window Defogger
Headlamp High Beam Relay
Not Used
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (Relay)
Rear Defog Relay
RTD
HVAC/ECAS
CIG LTR
TRL B/U
F/PMP
HI HDLP-RT
HDLP-LOW
A/C COMP
B/U LP
RR DEFOG
HDLP-HI
PRIME
A/C COMP
TCMB
RR WPR
RADIO
Air Conditioning Compressor
Transmission Control Module
Rear Wiper/Washer
AIRBAG
Audio System
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center,
Universal Home Remote
System, Rear Heated Seats
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
FRT PARK
SEO B1
DRL
LO HDLP-LT
SEO IGN
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan
Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
BTSI
CRNK
Starting System
The auxiliary electric
cooling fan fuse block is
located in the engine
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
next to the underhood
fuse block.
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
Not Used
Not Used
Horn Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
OnStar®
LO HDLP-RT
FOG LP
FOG LP
HORN
W/S WASH
W/S WASH
INFO
RADIO AMP
RH HID
HORN
EAP
TREC
SBA
Radio Amplifier
Not Used
Horn
Not Used
All-Wheel Drive Module
Not Used
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Fuses
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
Usage
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Relay Fuse
Cooling Fan Fuse
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan Relay 1
Cooling Fan Relay 3
Cooling Fan Relay 2
COOL/FAN 1
COOL/FAN 3
COOL/FAN 2
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
16.6 qt1
6.0 qt
Metric
15.7 L1
5.7 L
Cooling System Capacity
Crankcase Capacity
Fuel Tank Capacity
Escalade
Escalade ESV
Transfer Case Fluid
26.0 gal
31.0 gal
1.5 qt
98.0 L
117.0 L
1.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
1Add 2.0 L (2.1 qt) if equipped with rear heating for all engines.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 6.0L H.O. V8
N
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
on page 5-4.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See Additional Required Services
on page 6-6.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Check transfer case fluid level and add fluid as needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-16.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
•
Change transfer case fluid.
See footnote (m).
•
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (g).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
maintenance be recorded.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer tailgate handle
pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, and folding seat
hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap
and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Engine Coolant Level Check
(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-21 for further details.
Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-70.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
on page 2-23.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
{CAUTION:
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Power Steering
System
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
Cylinders
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Engine Oil
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Front and
Rear Axle
page 5-11.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-21.
Engine Coolant
Transfer Case
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
Points
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
GM 9985830.
(Two-Wheel
Drive)
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Weatherstrip Superlube (GM Part No.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Squeaks
U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Folding Seats, Canada 10953474).
and Fuel Door
Hinge
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
10368768
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
A1518C
PF46
88984215
Spark Plugs
12571164
41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Rear – 14.0 inches (35.5 cm)
15153642
12494839
—
—
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to the addresses below.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
From Puerto Rico:
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any situation
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in
the United States and Canada.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for
your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac
dealership.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km).
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Towing Service
• A description of the problem
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A
dealer technician, if available, can travel to your location
within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or
Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available,
for up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day
repair.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped
with StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is
also recorded. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters
have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if
its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ....................................... 3-86
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-32
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-32
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
